week 1 day 1 crm overview

57
© Copyright IBM Corporation 2009 IBM Global Business Services SAP CRM Overview – Architecture Module [1]: CRM Functional Overview Date

Upload: umasankar-reddy-g

Post on 12-Apr-2015

22 views

Category:

Documents


1 download

DESCRIPTION

CRM Overview Document

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

SAP CRM Overview ndash Architecture

Module [1] CRM Functional Overview

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 2

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Customer centric E-Business with MySAPCRM

Todayrsquos complex customer problems require a deployable customer relationship management (CRM) application that can directly address specific challenges regardless of where or when they occur in the cycle of interacting with selling to and servicing an organizationrsquos customers

mySAP CRM combines extensive functional capabilities in the core areas of marketing sales and service with award-winning analytics that are directly built in to the primary interaction channels used by organizations when interacting with their customers

All this functionality enables the closed-loop interaction cycle underlying mySAP CRMrsquos unique value propositions

mySAP CRM is built on an open reliable secure and scalable technology platform

The comprehensive range of services offered by SAP help to ensure quick implementation of mySAP CRM and support the ongoing optimization of the application environment

SAP AG 2004

Customer Centric E-Business with mySAP CRM

A Complete ApplicationComprehensive and Supporting Functions

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 3

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

CRM Architectural Concept

SAP AG2004

Mobile Clients

E-CommerceAs

a logical unit

SAP R3SAP ECC

SAPNetWeaver

Portal

TelephonyE-Mail

SAP CRM

mySAP CRM Architectural Concept

Handhelds

SAP SCM

SAP BW

SAPNetWeaver

BI

InteractionCenter

J 2EE IMS

FieldApplications

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 4

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

mySAP Customer Relationship Management (mySAP CRM) is a part of the mySAP Business Suite and contains a central CRM server which can access the system by means of various channels Additionally the CRM server can connect to other systems The following functions are supported in mySAP CRM

Interaction Center The integrated Interaction Center enables customers to use phone fax or e-mail to contact sales or service representatives

Internet access Users can configure and order products or services using the Internet components of mySAP CRM

Mobile clients and handheld devices The mobile sales force or mobile service engineers can connect to the SAP CRM system from their laptop computers or other mobile terminals to exchange the latest information with the central CRM server

The mySAP CRM application offers you the following fully integrated connections

The SAP CRM System as a central CRM server with its application components

SAP ERP Central Component as a back-end system with proven ERP functions

BI functions of SAP NetWeaver with comprehensive statistical and analysis capabilities

The SAP system as a global Available-to-Promise (ATP) check and demand planning solution

The SAP NetWeaver Portal as a tool that provides you with integrated access to all systems

CRM Architectural Concept

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Integration with other systems

ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions

SAP AG 2004

SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems

Plug-InR3 Adapter

ERP

CRM Middleware

BW Adapter

CRM Enterprise

SAPSCM

SAPBW

SAP CRM

depends on release

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area

SAP AG 2004

Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

Locator Work Area

Toolbar

Item list

Item details

Header details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to

ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data

ndash Organizational Data -

Objects and Features

Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes

Organizational Data Determination

ndash Business Partner

Category

Relationship

Roles

Extension

ndash Product

Type

Hierarchies

Relationship

Extension

Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM

ndash Partner Product Range

ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM

ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories

ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 2: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 2

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Customer centric E-Business with MySAPCRM

Todayrsquos complex customer problems require a deployable customer relationship management (CRM) application that can directly address specific challenges regardless of where or when they occur in the cycle of interacting with selling to and servicing an organizationrsquos customers

mySAP CRM combines extensive functional capabilities in the core areas of marketing sales and service with award-winning analytics that are directly built in to the primary interaction channels used by organizations when interacting with their customers

All this functionality enables the closed-loop interaction cycle underlying mySAP CRMrsquos unique value propositions

mySAP CRM is built on an open reliable secure and scalable technology platform

The comprehensive range of services offered by SAP help to ensure quick implementation of mySAP CRM and support the ongoing optimization of the application environment

SAP AG 2004

Customer Centric E-Business with mySAP CRM

A Complete ApplicationComprehensive and Supporting Functions

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 3

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

CRM Architectural Concept

SAP AG2004

Mobile Clients

E-CommerceAs

a logical unit

SAP R3SAP ECC

SAPNetWeaver

Portal

TelephonyE-Mail

SAP CRM

mySAP CRM Architectural Concept

Handhelds

SAP SCM

SAP BW

SAPNetWeaver

BI

InteractionCenter

J 2EE IMS

FieldApplications

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 4

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

mySAP Customer Relationship Management (mySAP CRM) is a part of the mySAP Business Suite and contains a central CRM server which can access the system by means of various channels Additionally the CRM server can connect to other systems The following functions are supported in mySAP CRM

Interaction Center The integrated Interaction Center enables customers to use phone fax or e-mail to contact sales or service representatives

Internet access Users can configure and order products or services using the Internet components of mySAP CRM

Mobile clients and handheld devices The mobile sales force or mobile service engineers can connect to the SAP CRM system from their laptop computers or other mobile terminals to exchange the latest information with the central CRM server

The mySAP CRM application offers you the following fully integrated connections

The SAP CRM System as a central CRM server with its application components

SAP ERP Central Component as a back-end system with proven ERP functions

BI functions of SAP NetWeaver with comprehensive statistical and analysis capabilities

The SAP system as a global Available-to-Promise (ATP) check and demand planning solution

The SAP NetWeaver Portal as a tool that provides you with integrated access to all systems

CRM Architectural Concept

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Integration with other systems

ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions

SAP AG 2004

SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems

Plug-InR3 Adapter

ERP

CRM Middleware

BW Adapter

CRM Enterprise

SAPSCM

SAPBW

SAP CRM

depends on release

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area

SAP AG 2004

Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

Locator Work Area

Toolbar

Item list

Item details

Header details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to

ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data

ndash Organizational Data -

Objects and Features

Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes

Organizational Data Determination

ndash Business Partner

Category

Relationship

Roles

Extension

ndash Product

Type

Hierarchies

Relationship

Extension

Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM

ndash Partner Product Range

ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM

ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories

ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 3: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 3

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

CRM Architectural Concept

SAP AG2004

Mobile Clients

E-CommerceAs

a logical unit

SAP R3SAP ECC

SAPNetWeaver

Portal

TelephonyE-Mail

SAP CRM

mySAP CRM Architectural Concept

Handhelds

SAP SCM

SAP BW

SAPNetWeaver

BI

InteractionCenter

J 2EE IMS

FieldApplications

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 4

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

mySAP Customer Relationship Management (mySAP CRM) is a part of the mySAP Business Suite and contains a central CRM server which can access the system by means of various channels Additionally the CRM server can connect to other systems The following functions are supported in mySAP CRM

Interaction Center The integrated Interaction Center enables customers to use phone fax or e-mail to contact sales or service representatives

Internet access Users can configure and order products or services using the Internet components of mySAP CRM

Mobile clients and handheld devices The mobile sales force or mobile service engineers can connect to the SAP CRM system from their laptop computers or other mobile terminals to exchange the latest information with the central CRM server

The mySAP CRM application offers you the following fully integrated connections

The SAP CRM System as a central CRM server with its application components

SAP ERP Central Component as a back-end system with proven ERP functions

BI functions of SAP NetWeaver with comprehensive statistical and analysis capabilities

The SAP system as a global Available-to-Promise (ATP) check and demand planning solution

The SAP NetWeaver Portal as a tool that provides you with integrated access to all systems

CRM Architectural Concept

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Integration with other systems

ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions

SAP AG 2004

SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems

Plug-InR3 Adapter

ERP

CRM Middleware

BW Adapter

CRM Enterprise

SAPSCM

SAPBW

SAP CRM

depends on release

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area

SAP AG 2004

Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

Locator Work Area

Toolbar

Item list

Item details

Header details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to

ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data

ndash Organizational Data -

Objects and Features

Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes

Organizational Data Determination

ndash Business Partner

Category

Relationship

Roles

Extension

ndash Product

Type

Hierarchies

Relationship

Extension

Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM

ndash Partner Product Range

ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM

ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories

ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 4: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 4

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

mySAP Customer Relationship Management (mySAP CRM) is a part of the mySAP Business Suite and contains a central CRM server which can access the system by means of various channels Additionally the CRM server can connect to other systems The following functions are supported in mySAP CRM

Interaction Center The integrated Interaction Center enables customers to use phone fax or e-mail to contact sales or service representatives

Internet access Users can configure and order products or services using the Internet components of mySAP CRM

Mobile clients and handheld devices The mobile sales force or mobile service engineers can connect to the SAP CRM system from their laptop computers or other mobile terminals to exchange the latest information with the central CRM server

The mySAP CRM application offers you the following fully integrated connections

The SAP CRM System as a central CRM server with its application components

SAP ERP Central Component as a back-end system with proven ERP functions

BI functions of SAP NetWeaver with comprehensive statistical and analysis capabilities

The SAP system as a global Available-to-Promise (ATP) check and demand planning solution

The SAP NetWeaver Portal as a tool that provides you with integrated access to all systems

CRM Architectural Concept

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Integration with other systems

ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions

SAP AG 2004

SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems

Plug-InR3 Adapter

ERP

CRM Middleware

BW Adapter

CRM Enterprise

SAPSCM

SAPBW

SAP CRM

depends on release

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area

SAP AG 2004

Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

Locator Work Area

Toolbar

Item list

Item details

Header details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to

ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data

ndash Organizational Data -

Objects and Features

Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes

Organizational Data Determination

ndash Business Partner

Category

Relationship

Roles

Extension

ndash Product

Type

Hierarchies

Relationship

Extension

Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM

ndash Partner Product Range

ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM

ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories

ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 5: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 5

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Integration with other systems

ndash Data is exchanged between the CRM system and a connected ERP system (SAP R3 Release 31I and higher) mainly by means of the CRM middleware A plug-in installed on the ERP system acts as a counterpart to the R3 adapter supporting the data communication between the two systems The data exchange includes an initial transfer of customizing data master data and transaction data to the CRM system as well as delta data in both directions

SAP AG 2004

SAP CRM and Other SAP Systems

Plug-InR3 Adapter

ERP

CRM Middleware

BW Adapter

CRM Enterprise

SAPSCM

SAPBW

SAP CRM

depends on release

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area

SAP AG 2004

Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

Locator Work Area

Toolbar

Item list

Item details

Header details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to

ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data

ndash Organizational Data -

Objects and Features

Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes

Organizational Data Determination

ndash Business Partner

Category

Relationship

Roles

Extension

ndash Product

Type

Hierarchies

Relationship

Extension

Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM

ndash Partner Product Range

ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM

ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories

ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 6: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 6

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structures of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

The screenshot shows the typical User Interface (UI) of a transaction in the ldquoSalesrdquo area

SAP AG 2004

Structure of Business Transactions on SAP GUI

Locator Work Area

Toolbar

Item list

Item details

Header details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to

ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data

ndash Organizational Data -

Objects and Features

Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes

Organizational Data Determination

ndash Business Partner

Category

Relationship

Roles

Extension

ndash Product

Type

Hierarchies

Relationship

Extension

Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM

ndash Partner Product Range

ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM

ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories

ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 7: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

SAP CRM Overview ndash Master Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to

ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data

ndash Organizational Data -

Objects and Features

Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes

Organizational Data Determination

ndash Business Partner

Category

Relationship

Roles

Extension

ndash Product

Type

Hierarchies

Relationship

Extension

Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM

ndash Partner Product Range

ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM

ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories

ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 8: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 8

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Module Objectives At the completion of this module you should be able to

ndash Explain CRM Master and Transaction Data

ndash Organizational Data -

Objects and Features

Explain Org Model scenarios and attributes

Organizational Data Determination

ndash Business Partner

Category

Relationship

Roles

Extension

ndash Product

Type

Hierarchies

Relationship

Extension

Exchange of Product between R3 and CRM

ndash Partner Product Range

ndash Maintain products and enhance products in CRM

ndash Explain product hierarchies and categories

ndash Understand product data exchange between CRM and R3 backend

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 9: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 9

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Master data in SAP CRM

Master Data Transaction

Organizational Data PPOSA_CRMPPOMA_CRM

Business Partner and Hierarchy BP BPH

Product and Hierarchy COMMPR01 COMM_HIERARCHY

Partner Product Range CRMM_PPR

Pricing and Condition SAPCNDGCM

Price List BEACNPL02

Commodity Pricing CRMM_FA_GCM

Content Management CRM_KW

Payment Card PCA

Installed Base IB52

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 10: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 10

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Transaction Data

Transactional Data Transaction

Activities CRMD_BUS2000126

Marketing CRM_MKTPL

Leads CRMD_BUS2000108

Opportunities CRMD_BUS2000111

Sales Contract CRMD_BUS2000121

Sales Order CRMD_BUS2000115

Service Process CRMD_BUS2000116

Service Confirmation CRMD_BUS2000117

Service Contract CRMD_BUS2000112

Complaints CRMD_BUS2000120

Billing Document BEA_BD_01

Sales and Service Quotation Contract Order Service Confirmation

CRMD_ORDERCIC0

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 11: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Organizational Data

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 12: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 12

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Data ndash Objects and Feature Organizational data defines the companyrsquos functional organizational structure in CRM

Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational data is comprised of 2 objects namely

ndash Organizational Unit ndash Functional Unit of the organization like Departments groups project teams

ndash Positions ndash The performer of the task like Sales Manager

Feature of Organizational data

ndash Flexible The organizational units are not already specified you can make your own units or leave some units out

ndash Time dependent This enables you to plan organizational changes in the future you can maintain different organizational structures for different time periods in parallel that means you can plan changes in future

ndash Adaptable and extendable you can maintain and change the organizational plan at any time without making changes in Customizing

ndash One structure for sales and service This can be changed just by activation An organizational unit can be a sales organization and service organization at the same time Scenario-specific data in the structure is assigned to the organizational units with attributes

ndash Organizational units can take the role of a business partner

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 13: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 13

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Objects ndash Organizational Model Organizational objects can be linked to hierarchies to form functional relationships in the organizational plan

Organizational units form the basis of an organizational plan Organizational units are functional units of a company Eg departments groups or project teams

Positions show the functional task distribution of individual items and their report structure in the organizational plan Positions are concrete items in a company which can be occupied by holders (employees or users) for example the campaign manager for India

Org Unit

India South

Office Chennai

Sales org

Sales office

Positions

Emp group 1

Test lead

Ram Sharma

Position

Holder

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 14: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 14

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational scenarios

Sales Org Service Marketing

Scenarios are applications where the org unit is valid

In each scenario you can control which attributes are available and which properties the attributes haveYou can assign one or more scenarios to an organizational unit Hence oneorganizational unit can be used for different areasThe same organizational unit can be a sales organization in the Sales scenario and a service organization in the Service scenario or marketing organizational unit in the marketing scenario

You can maintain different attributes depending on the assigned scenario

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 15: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 15

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Organizational Attributes

They are used to define the type of an organizational unit

For example

Sales Organization

Sales Office

Sales Group

Service Organization

They are used to define the responsibilities of an organizational unit

For example

Country

Division

Distribution Channel

Postal Code

Organizational Attributes General Attributes

Attributes are always maintained for a specific scenario which means you can maintain different attributes for each scenario Attributes are generally passed onto the subordinate organizational unit However you can overwrite the attribute value of a subordinate organizational unit with another attribute value (inheritance type overwrite inherited local values) There are two kinds of attributes organizational and generalOrganizational attributes indicate the type of an organizational unitGeneral attributes define the responsibilities of an organizational unit1048708

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 16: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 16

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Determining Organizational data In the CRM System you have the following options for determining

organizational data in the document You can set these in Customizing depending on the transaction type

ndash no determination In this case enter the organizational data (for example sales area) manually in the document

ndash automatic determination The system determines organizational data using the data available in the document for example the business partner number region product or using the user assignments for the organizational unit (using the position) The determination can follow two route ndash either the responsibilities rule type or Organizational Rule Type Organizational rule type reads the organizational modelrsquos attributes and determines the organizational data for the transaction Responsibility rule determines the transactionrsquos organizational data based on the attribute of the responsible person

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 17: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 17

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Settings for organizational data at item level

Organizational data at Item level

Without header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the product

With header division The organizational data is copied from the document header The division is derived from the document header

There is no organizational data at item level (no organizational data screen)

Settings in customizing

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Assign an organizational data profile without a determination rule to the item category

Do not assign the organizational data profile to the item category

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 18: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Business Partner

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 19: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 19

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Category

Person GroupOrganization

A business partner can be a person a group of people or an organization representing a business interest This categorization is known as the business partner categoryA group is the depiction of a married couple or an executive board that share common interests Business partners are grouped according to user defined criteriaThe organization represents units such as a company a division of a company a club or an association1048708

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 20: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 20

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Groupings and RolesBP Groupings Controls the number range

Can be External or Internal

Configuration ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross Application Component -gt SAP Business Partner -gt Business Partner -gt Basic Settings -gt Number Ranges and Groupings

BP Roles

A role offers a particular view of the Business partner data

Depending on which business processes the business partner is involved in completely different information about the business partner may be needed 1048708 You can create more than one business partner role for one business partner general information such as name address and bank details must be entered only once

1048708 Eg Of roles could be Sold-to-party payer contact person etc

Each partner role contains various data sets classified as General data CRM-specific Relationships

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 21: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 21

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship

Organization Person

Has contact person

Is contact person of

Relationship Attributes

Communication data

Function Department

Employeeresponsible

Can be time dependent

A business partner relationship represents the business connection between

two business partners

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 22: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 22

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

The business partner relationship category determines the business-related characteristics of a relationship between business partners

Relationshiprsquo is the term used if a relationship category contains information on concrete business partners

The business partner relationship categories that can be selected depend on the business partner category and on the BP role

A distinction is made between one-way (unidirectional) and two-way (bi-directional) relationship categories

In the case of a one-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) but not the other way round

In the case of a two-way relationship category a relationship exists from a business partner (1) to a business partner (2) and the other way round

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 23: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 23

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Relationship Category

One way BP relationship Category

ndash Eg Is employee of

ndash Eg Has employer

Undirected BP relationship categories

ndash Eg Is married to

Configuration

ndash Extend and define relationship categories

ndash SAP IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Business Partner -gtBusiness Partner -gt Extensibility

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 24: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 24

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extensibility

Extension of the Business Partner by adding attributes

Extension by adding BP roles ndash(to be done by ABAP developers)

Extension to include a check on SAP fields ndash eg check for a certain lastname

Extension of the relationships by adding attributes

You can create new relationship categories Examples of relationships

ndash Is a member of (club)

ndash Is an employee of (business partner company)

ndash Is the sondaughter of

Again here like BP roles ABAP development is required to create new relationship categories

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 25: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 25

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Hierarchy and Group Hierarchy Category

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 2

Level 3 Level 3BP 010

BP 020 BP 030 BP 040 BP 050

bullHierarchy trees are used to map business partner group hierarchies in CRM For example purchasing collaboration chains etc

Group Hierarchy CategoryBusiness partner group hierarchies consist of hierarchy nodesBusiness partner master records are subsequently assigned to the hierarchy nodesGroup hierarchies maintained originally in CRM enterprise cannot be transferred to SAP R3Eg Pricing hierarchies or reporting structure hierarchiesMultilevel group hierarchies can existValidity for hierarchies can be maintained

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 26: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 26

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

BP Extension

Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEWB)

New fields and tables can be added

Easy and effiecient

Wizard for user guidance

Retains results in case of SAP upgrades

Business Data Toolset

Additional tab and changes to data set can be done using BDT Transaction to access BDT is BUSP

Visual Configuration Tool (VCT)

VCT is used to change the screen and sequence of screen by simple drag and drop Changes made are not affected by release updates

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 27: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Product Master

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 28: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 28

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

[Product Master] Agenda

Business Scenario

Product Types

Structure of CRM Product master

Maintaining Products

Inactive Products

Relationships

Hierarchy and Categories

Enhancing Product master

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Download of CRM Product data from R3

Competitor Products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 29: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 29

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Types

CRM Product master has the following product types

ndash Material

ndash Service

ndash Warranty

ndash Financing

ndash Financial Service

ndash Intellectual Property (IP)

Configurable products are given attributes and attribute values when sold

Warranty information is created with respect to product

IP is available for media industry

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 30: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 30

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Structure of CRM Product master

SAP Basic data

ndash Product categories

ndash Basic texts

ndash Status

Sales and Distribution

ndash Distribution channel

ndash Sales

Other views

New views can be defined at IMG -gt Cross Application Components -gt SAP Products -gt Settings for product maintenance -gt Define Views

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 31: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 31

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Products

Temporary or inconsistent products can be marked inactive

Relationships or dependencies between products can be modeled (eg accessories)

Products can be copied created and changed Inactive product data can be deleted

Base Hierarchy R3PRODSTYP maps to the product types in R3

Structured products can be created and downloaded

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 32: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 32

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Inactive Products

Inconsistent products are made inactive

Collective processing can be done to make products active

Inactive products can be deleted

Inactive products can be created by allowing inactive products This can be done at IMG -gt Cross application components -gtSAP Products -gt Basic Settings -gt Allow inactive products

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 33: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 33

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Relationships and Competitor Products Has Accessories is an important relationship

Other relationships

ndash Customers

ndash Financed by

ndash Content provider

ndash Indemnity payment

ndash Vendors

ndash Components

ndash Warranty

Competitor Product Lean product master

Exchanged with mobile clients in both directions

Derived relationships

ndash Competitor -gt Competitor product

ndash Customer -gt competitor product

ndash Own Product -gt Competitor product

Available only in PCUI

Has accessories

Customers

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 34: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 34

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

Categories and hierarchies are used to group products and individual objects according to different criteria The purpose of a hierarchy will depend on the business criteria involved and the companys requirements

A hierarchy can be multi-level and be used for control or informative purposes

Within the product master assigning a hierarchy to the application Product enables it to be used as a base hierarchy within the product master

Each productindividual object created must be assigned to a category from this base hierarchy

Base hierarchies- With an SAP R3 customizing download SAP R3 material master groupings are converted to SAP CRM category hierarchies (base hierarchies)

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 35: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 35

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories

R3PRODSTYP(default base hierarchy)

R3MATCLASS

R3PRODHIER

SAP R3 SAP CRM

Material Type

Material Group

Product Hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 36: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 36

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchies and Categories(2)

Hierarchy nodesSoftware

HardwareDesktop

Laptop

Printers

Categories

Sub-Categories

bullCategories are arranged in hierarchies All lower-level categories inherit the product type and the set types of the higher-level category Additional set types can be assigned to lower-level categories bullThe assignment of a product can be changed or deletedbullAn employee responsible at category level can be stored bullA hierarchy can consist of many sub-categories and responsibilities can be mapped through these categories1048708

Product categories are used to group products together according to various criteria

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 37: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 37

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Product Category

If a product type is assigned to a category only productsindividual objects of this product type can be assigned to the category Assigning a product type to a category makes it possible to assign set types to the category In product or individual object maintenance these set types appear within the views (that is on the tab pages) that can be maintained for a product or individual object

To prevent a set type from being assigned to a product or individual object more than once (via different categories) the following rules apply when working with categories and hierarchies

ndash A set type may be assigned to several categories in a hierarchy However a set type may be assigned only in one hierarchy per product type

ndash A product or individual object can be assigned to several product categories as long as they belong to different hierarchies A product or individual object can therefore only be assigned to one category per hierarchy

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 38: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Master Data | Apr 11 2023 38

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Enhancing the Product master

Categories

ProductSoftware

HardwareDesktopLaptop

MonitorMonitor

characteristics

Hierarchies Set types

Color

Type

Size

Attributes

Creating the product master is done in the following steps

1 Create hierarchies and categories2 Create attributes3 Create set types4 Assign attributes to set types5 Assign set types to categories (within the category and hierarchy maintenance)

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 39: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 39

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Download and upload of CRM Product data from and to R3

Download of Product data from R3

Initial download is a one time download of products in R3 to CRM Customization is necessary to enable this

Changes to master data in R3 move to CRM through delta downloads Customizing changes in R3 do not move to CRM

Upload of CRM Product data into R3

Upload can be prohibited IMG -gt CRM -gt Master data -gt Products -gt Settings for product type -gt Allow upload for a product type

Upload is carried out manually for each product

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 40: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

IBase

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 41: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 41

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

ComponentbullProductsbullTextbullInstalled BasebullIndividual ObjectbullCustomer-specific types

Installed Base

Headerbull Categorybull External IDbull DescriptionbullStatus ( System User)bull Authorization group

Partners

Address

Documents

Components

The technical equipment (installation) at the customerrsquos site which needs to be Serviced Supported

Partners

Address

Documents

Qualification

Warranty

Counter

Qualification

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 42: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 42

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Objects

Individual Objects enable you

To track those uniquely identified specific objects in business process

Object history

Partner history

Attribute configuration history

Business document history

Object structure

Relationship history

Individual Object with reference to product

Attribute set types

Relationships

Document links

To manage specific data valid for distinct individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 43: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 43

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Individual Object in comparison to Product

Contains information on the features of goods or service

It describes generic features Number of IP nodes on a switch type XYZ12

Specifies data valid for only one uniquely identified single object For ex

ndash ID number

ndash Location

ndash Address

Object families

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

IndividualObject

Attributes- describing the

associated Individual objectsas Individual fields

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 44: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 44

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object - Integration

Service Order Integration

ndash Complaints

ndash In-house repairs

ndash Service order amp confirmation

ndash Service contracts ndash Service contracts information is visible in the Installed Base

ndash Case management

Channel Integration

ndash E-Service Integration

Product Self-registration

ndash Field Applications

Mobile Service

ndash Interaction Centre

Sales service amp marketing processes ndash Search display amp detailed display of Ibase in the CIC navigation area Ease-of-use transfer of selected installed base components into service process as reference object or spare part items

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 45: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 45

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Installed Base Customizing steps

IBase Category

ndash Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Installed Base Category Define Installed Base Category and Installation Rules

ndash Assign user status profile

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Basic Setting Change Status Profile for User Status

ndash Permitted component types

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Define Component Types

ndash Assign Partner determination procedure

Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Assign Partner Determination Procedure to Installed Base Category

Customer-specific component types

ndash Requires a creation of a function group and a class

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 46: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 46

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Individual Object Customizing Setting

1 Define an object familyCross-Application Components SAP Product Individual Objects Define Object Families

2 IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Installed Base Individual Object FamiliesAssign Object Families to Installed Base Categories

3 Define the fields (attributes) (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Attribute and create the attributes you require

4 Define the set types (SAP GUI) Master Data Products Maintain Set Types and Attributes Select Set Type

5 Include set types in the APIBDOC structures Maintain Set Types and Attributes screen you choose Set TypesAttributes Transport Set Type

6 Define object family - To transport a hierarchy from one client or system to another Cross-Application Components SAP Products Product Category

7 Create Categories for object families Cross-Application Components SAP Products Basic Settings

8 Initialize number assignment Cross-Application Components under SAP Products Settings for Product Type Number Assignment Define Number Ranges for Materials

9 Reserve set types for an object family A set type can be used for products and individual objects However if one of the fields in a set type contains data that is only relevant for an individual object it can be reserved for individual objects

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 47: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 47

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Counter Customizing steps

1 Maintain Counter attributes

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter attributes

2 Maintain Counter Categories

IMG Customer Relationship Management Master Data Counter Maintain Counter Categories

3 Set flags on transaction type and or item category

IMG Customer Relationship Management Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Set the checkmarks

Display Counter

Display Reading

One tab page

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 48: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

PPR

Module [1] CRM Overview- Master Data

Date

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 49: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 49

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR ndash Partner Product Range

Partner Product Range ndash It allows to maintain a combination of Partner Material Sales Area and time

System has the feature to include or exclude the combination

System allows to integrate PPR with Marketing Transaction helliphellip This in turn allows user to create Marketing transaction to be created with the pre stated combination

CRM 50 onwards the combination of partner and material can be maintained in new master data called listing

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 50: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 50

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

PPR contd

Header data

Item data

Item details

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 51: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

Exercises

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 52: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 52

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Maintaining Org Model

Maintaining Org Model

ndash You create an organizational model by creating organizational units

ndash You display the organizational model or individual organizational units

ndash You change the organizational model that is create new organizational units and assign schedule or delete these

ndash You maintain attributes for organizational units

Maintaining Attributes

ndash You maintain important data like address validity period

ndash You define attributes for each organizational unit of each scenario for example currency region product group

ndash By assigning attributes you maintain sales areas by assigning the attributes distribution channel and division to a sales organization or its subordinate organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 53: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 53

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Creating Organizational Model Manually in CRM

Create an organizational model in Customizing for CRM under Master Data Organizational Management Organizational Model Create Organizational Model and define sales organizations sales offices and sales groups in it

Enter the corresponding organizational units in the R3 System (mapping)

Define the sales areas by assigning the sales organization distribution channels and divisions as attributes

You can also assign distribution channels and divisions to organizational units below a sales organization (for example a sales office) The system then reads the sales area with the higher-level sales organization

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 54: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 54

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Hierarchy Maintenance

Creating Hierarchies

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears with either the locator or work area depending on your user settings

Choose Create HierarchyThe dialog box Create Hierarchy appears

Enter a hierarchy ID and description and choose ContinueThe hierarchy maintenance screen is then displayed

If you want to assign category IDs using a numbering scheme specify the numbering scheme required

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 55: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 55

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Category Maintenance

Creating Product Categories

In the user menu choose Maintain Categories and HierarchiesThe Maintain Categories and Hierarchies screen appears

Double-click the required hierarchy from either the Worklist or Search tab page in the locatorThe hierarchy data is displayed in the work area

Choose Create Category if the hierarchy is new and does not yet have any categories This creates a root in the hierarchy Otherwise double-click the category below which the new category is to be created and choose Create Category

Enter a category ID and description

If necessary specify a product type for the category so that you can assign set types and relationship types to the category

Enter data as required

Choose the Set Types tab For each set type you can specify the view in which it appears in productobject maintenance and its position in the view for example above or below another set type If you do not assign a view the set type will appear in the Basic Data view

Choose the Relationship Types tab and if necessary assign the relevant relationship types

Save your data

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 56: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

Presentation Title | IBM Internal Use | Document ID | Apr 11 2023 56

IBM Global Business Services

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

Exercise on User-Exit and BADI

1 Exercise on User-Exit (Function-Exit)

Implement an User-Exit that will fire whenever you change any Customer details Code an Information message inside the User Exit code so that when you run XD02 after Activating the Project (thus the User Exit) this message is displayed in a popup

2 Exercise on Business AddIn (BAdi)

When the batch is created and then saved in transaction MSC1N check if the Total Shelf life of the Material is initial and issue an information message and prevents saving the batch

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU

Page 57: Week 1 Day 1 CRM Overview

copy Copyright IBM Corporation 2009

IBM Global Business Services

THANK YOU